User's Guide

ManualsBrandsCasio ManualsOtherEX-FR200

ﺔﻴﻤﻗﺭ ﺍﺮﻴﻣﺎﻛ

ﻡﺪﺨﺘﺴﻤﻟﺍ ﻞﻴﻟﺩ

.ﺍﺬﻫ

CASIO

ﺞﺘﻨﻤﻟ ﻙءﺍﺮﺷ ﻰﻠﻋ ﻙﺮﻜﺸﻧ

•.ﻡﺪﺨﺘﺴﻤﻟﺍ ﻞﻴﻟﺩ ﻲﻓ ﺓﺩﺭﺍﻮﻟﺍ ﺕﺎﻃﺎﻴﺘﺣﻻﺍ ﺓءﺍﺮﻗ ﻦﻣ ﺍﺮﻴﻣﺎﻜﻟﺍ ﻡﺍﺪﺨﺘﺳﺍ ﻞﺒﻗ ﻖﻘﺤﺗ

•.

ﻼﺒﻘﺘﺴﻣ ﻪﻴﻟﺇ ﻉﻮﺟﺮﻠﻟ ﻦﻣﺁ ﻥﺎﻜﻣ ﻲﻓ ﻡﺪﺨﺘﺴﻤﻟﺍ ﻞﻴﻟﺪﺑ ﻆﻔﺘﺣﺍ

• ﻰﻠﻋ ﻲﻤﺳﺮﻟﺍ

EXILIM

ﻊﻗﻮﻣ ﺓﺭﺎﻳﺰﺑ ﻢﻗ ،ﺞﺘﻨﻤﻟﺍ ﺍﺬﻬﺑ ﺔﺻﺎﺨﻟﺍ ﺕﺎﻣﻮﻠﻌﻤﻟﺍ ﺙﺪﺣﺃ ﻰﻠﻋ ﻉﻼﻃﻺﻟ

http://www.exilim.com/

Summary of content (151 pages)

PAGE 1
‫‪AR‬‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﻧﺸﻜﺮﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺮﺍءﻙ ﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ‪ CASIO‬ﻫﺬﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻼ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺁﻣﻦ ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‬ ‫• ﻟﻺﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ‪ EXILIM‬ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻤﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪http://www.exilim.
PAGE 2
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻓﺮﺍﻍ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻋﺒﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺃﻱ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺒﺎﺋﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫)‪(EX-FR200CA‬‬ ‫)‪(EX-FR200CT‬‬ ‫ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫• ﺗﺮﺩ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ً‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺼﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫• ﺗﺮﺩ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ً‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ‪.
PAGE 3
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺃﻭﻻً!‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻛﺘﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺖ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻛﺘﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻨﺎ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻻﺣﻈﺖ ﺃﻱ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺗﺴﺎﺅﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺧﺎﻃﺊ ﺃﻭ ﺧﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳُﺤﻈﺮ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺃﻱ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻮﺍء ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻠﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺠﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺄﻱ‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻛﺘﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺼﺮﻳﺢ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫‪ CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD.
PAGE 4
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ‪2.....................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﻫﺬﺍ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻻ! ‪3..........................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﺎﻡ‪8......................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ ‪9...................................................................
PAGE 5
‫❚❙ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫❚‬ ‫❚‬ ‫❚‬ ‫❚‬ ‫❚‬ ‫❚‬ ‫❚‬ ‫❚‬ ‫❚‬ ‫❚‬ ‫❚‬ ‫‪50‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪50 ....................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪) ..................................................‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ(‪51 ......‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪) .......................................................‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‪51 ......‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪) .................
PAGE 6
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫❚‬ ‫❚‬ ‫❚‬ ‫❚‬ ‫❚‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ‪77 .......................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ‪) ......‬ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪77 ......‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪) ............‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪78 ......‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‪) .....................‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ(‪79 ......‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ LAN‬ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ‪) ................
PAGE 7
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺯﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪)...........................................‬ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ(‪109 ...‬‬ ‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪) ....................................................‬ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ(‪110 ...‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ‪) ...........................‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‪110 ...‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪) ....................................‬ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ(‪110 ...‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪) .......................................................
PAGE 8
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺮﺡ ﻛﻞ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ‪.
PAGE 9
‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻹﻋﻼﻣﻚ ﺩﻭﻣﺎً ﺑﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻭﺍﻟﻐﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﻣﻮﺍﺿﻊ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﻤﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻌﻠﻴﺎً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 10
‫‪ .‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪(51‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻭﻗﺖ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(48‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‬ ‫ﺷﻔﺎﻓﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 11
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﻭﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(103‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :100-0023 :‬ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٢٣‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ ”‪.“100CASIO‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 12
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ CASIO‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺰﻭﻳﺪ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ CASIO‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﺑﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﺘﺴﻬﻴﻞ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻖ ﺑﺸﺄﻥ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﻧﻔﺴﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﺑﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 41‬ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ®‪ Bluetooth‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫)‪.
PAGE 13
‫‪ .‬ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 62‬ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻳﺘﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻟﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻭﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 67‬ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺗﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪.
PAGE 14
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺟﺎﺗﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺼﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ‪ .‬ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺟﺎﺗﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﺸﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺗﻼﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺄﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺑﺼﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﻭﺍﻷﻭﺳﺎﺥ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .
PAGE 15
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺼﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺼﻠﻴﺔ ﻛﺤﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪ ٩٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺳﺤﺐ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ]‪ [FREE‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫‪ ٩٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﺘﻤﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ]‪[FREE‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ A‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ B‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺼﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ )ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪B‬‬ ‫‪A‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺼﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 16
‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺼﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺼﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ١٥‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ A‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ C‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺼﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪D‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻣﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ A‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ D‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺼﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪A‬‬ ‫ﺻﺎﻣﻮﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺻﺎﻣﻮﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻟﺘﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ )ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ( ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺼﻠﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 17
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﺤﻠﻘﺔ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺣﺰﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻗﻀﻴﺐ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﺤﻠﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻹﺑﺰﻳﻢ ﻟﺘﺄﻣﻴﻨﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺴﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻤﺮ ﻟﺴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻹﺑﺰﻳﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﺴﺎﻥ‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫‪ .٤‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺴﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ ﻭﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻠﺴﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺑﺰﻳﻢ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻠﺴﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺑﺰﻳﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﺴﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺑﺄﻣﺎﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﺤﻠﻘﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺴﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﺠﺒﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻤﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .
PAGE 18
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻟﻤﺲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺈﺻﺒﻌﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﻈﺎﺕ ﺑﺈﺻﺒﻌﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻡ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺛﺒﺖ ﺍﻹﺑﻬﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺒﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺨﺎﺭﺝ‪.
PAGE 19
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻻً‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ً‬ ‫ﻛﻼ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﻣﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺸﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﺳﺘﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺤﻦ ً‬ ‫ﻛﻼ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻗﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﻤﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻴﻠﺘﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪USB‬‬ ‫• ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ )ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻦ‪(.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 20
‫‪ .‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻰ‬ ‫ﻳﻀﻲء ﺑﺎﻷﺣﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬ ‫ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺑﺎﻷﺣﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺘﺎﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ ،USB‬ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(129‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪.
PAGE 21
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﺎﺩ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.129‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻴﺼﺒﺢ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﺳﺎﺧ ًﻨﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻭﻻ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻄﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺩﻭﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺟﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻀﻲء ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻣﻮﺻﻼﺕ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪.
PAGE 22
‫‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺸﺤﻦ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ )‪.(2 ،1‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫)ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬ ‫‪USB‬‬ ‫]‪[USB‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪USB‬‬ ‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫)ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻏﻄﺎء‬ ‫]‪[USB‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻼﺕ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.
PAGE 23
‫‪ .‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻰ‬ ‫ﻳﻀﻲء ﺑﺎﻷﺣﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬ ‫ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺑﺎﻷﺣﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺘﺎﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ ،USB‬ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(129‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪.
PAGE 24
‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺛﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻭﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻐﺮﺍﻕ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﺎﺩ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 25
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﻔﺎﺩ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻴﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺃﺣﻤﺮ‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺃﺣﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺷﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﺘﻨﻔﺪ ﺷﺤﻨﺘﻬﺎ ﺗﻤﺎ ًﻣﺎ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪.
PAGE 26
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪-‬ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ Bluetooth‬ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻣﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ”ﺍﻹﻗﺮﺍﻥ“ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻭﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺄﺣﺪﻫﺎ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﻣﺘﻰ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﻤﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ .
PAGE 27
‫• ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺩﺍﺓﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ١٠‬ﺃﻣﺘﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﺧﻤﺲ ﺃﻣﺘﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻮﻣﺾ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﻭﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ” “ )ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺳﻴﺌﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.
PAGE 28
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫”‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ” “ )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ” “ )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(58‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫“ )ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ( ﺛﻢ ﻟﻤﺲ ” “‬ ‫”‬ ‫)ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫“‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‬ ‫)ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ(‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ” “ )ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‪.
PAGE 29
‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ ١٠ :‬ﻳﻮﻟﻴﻮ‪٢٠١٧ ،‬‬ ‫ﻳﻮﻡ‪/‬ﺷﻬﺮ‪/‬ﺳﻨﺔ ‪17/7/10 3‬‬ ‫ﺳﻨﺔ‪/‬ﺷﻬﺮ‪/‬ﻳﻮﻡ ‪10/7/17 3‬‬ ‫ﺳﻨﺔ‪/‬ﻳﻮﻡ‪/‬ﺷﻬﺮ ‪7/10/17 3‬‬ ‫‪.٤‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ )ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺸﻬﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ( ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ” “‪ “ ” ،‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ ١٢‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭ‪ ٢٤‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫”‪ “am (pm)”/“24h‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ” “‪ “ ” ،‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٥‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ‬ ‫”‪.
PAGE 30
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺷﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻏﺎﻟﺒًﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﺎ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺮﺍء ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺎً ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺳﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 31
‫ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪[p‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ]‪.[CARD‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺿﻊ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬ ‫ﻷﻋﻠﻰ )ﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻜﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﻤﻊ ﺻﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺮﺍﺭﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻏﻼﻕ ﻏﻄﺎء ]‪.
PAGE 32
‫‪ .‬ﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺮﺭﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ً‬ ‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ‪ .‬ﺍﺟﺬﺏ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ )ﺑﺪء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ( ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪.
PAGE 33
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﺘﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻊ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﻭﺃﻏﺮﺍﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(40‬ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺒﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﻳﺔ ﺗﻐﻄﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺃﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﺪﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺪﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪°١٨٥‬‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ‬ ‫‪°١٨٥‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 34
‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ )ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ( )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٤‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺒﺔ“‪.
PAGE 35
‫ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﺎﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [0‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﺒﺪء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [0‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 48‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪.
PAGE 36
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.59‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ” “ )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(58‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(10‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 37
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺻﺒﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻤﺘﻠﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻌﺪ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻭﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺬﻛﺮ ﺃﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻒ )ﺻﻮﺭﺓ( ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‬ ‫“ )ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ” “‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٤‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ“‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٥‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 38
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺗﺴﻄﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﻴﺪﻙ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻂء ﺍﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺿﻮﺿﺎء‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ ً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(40‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻠﺤﻈﻲ ﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻮﻧﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 39
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [p‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ‬ ‫”‬ ‫“ )ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ( ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫]‪) [p‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‬ ‫“ )ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ(‪.
PAGE 40
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‬ ‫“ )ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻟﻤﺲ ” “ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻠﻲ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻪ‪.
PAGE 41
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪ ١٨٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ )ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺒﺔ(‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺒﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪٣٨٨٨x٣٨٨٨‬‬ ‫‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ‪.١:١‬‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪°١٨٥‬‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ‬ ‫‪°١٨٥‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”‬ ‫“ )ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺒﺔ( ﻛﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ”ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺒﺔ“‪ ،‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 42
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ )ﺑﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ(‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ ‪ ٣٦٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺒﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻛﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ‪١٨٦٤x٧٤٥٦‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”‬ ‫“ )ﺑﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ( ﻛﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺩﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.
PAGE 43
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ‪) ٣:٤‬ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ(‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺟﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ )ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ‪ (٣:٤‬ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻪ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ‪٢٤٢٤x٣٢٣٢‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”‬ ‫“ )ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ( ﻛﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪.
PAGE 44
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻟﻠﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﻭﻓﻘًﺎ ﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ )ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ(‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﻬﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺸﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻌﺰﺯ ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺸﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﻛﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﻟﺮﻛﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﻠﻴﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺎء‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻌﺰﺯ ﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻠﻴﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺎء‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻓﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻌﺰﺯ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻓﻴﻪ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺣﻼﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 45
‫‪.٥‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺛﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪ 15 ،‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ 30 ،‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺘﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫‪:t³‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺧﻤﺲ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺒﻮﻋﺔ ﺑﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺪﺗﻪ ﺧﻤﺲ ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪*.‬‬ ‫‪ ³‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺪﺗﻪ ﺧﻤﺲ ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪ *.‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ t‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪ :‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫* ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”‪ 5‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ“ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ”ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ“‪ ،‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺯﻣﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٦‬‬ ‫‪ .٧‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”ﺑﺪء“‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‬ ‫“ )ﻋﻮﺩﺓ(‪.
PAGE 46
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﻀﺎﺩ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﻀﺎﺩ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻧﻔﺪ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﺷﺤﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ‪ .‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [p‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪.
PAGE 47
‫‪ .‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ”‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”ﻧﻌﻢ“‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫“‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻳﺪﻭ ًﻳﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪.
PAGE 48
‫ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻓﺎﺋﻖ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 51‬ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [0‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ‬ ‫”‪ “HS120‬ﺃﻭ ”‪ “HS240‬ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ”‪ “4K‬ﺃﻭ ”)‪.
PAGE 49
‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻗﻀﺎء ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺩﺍﻓﺌﺔ ً‬ ‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻟﻤﺴﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻭﻻ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻄﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺧﻼﻑ ”‪ “HS120‬ﺃﻭ ”‪،“HS240‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺬﺭﺍ ﻛﻲ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺤﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﺄﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﻛﻦ ً‬ ‫– ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺟﻴﺪﺓ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ‪.
PAGE 50
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‪.“MENU‬‬ ‫“ )ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 51
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ(‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ 3 MENU 3‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪3 “r REC MENU‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.
PAGE 52
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺒﺔ‬ ‫‪1:1‬‬ ‫‪ ٣٠‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺙ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ‬ ‫‪ ٣٠‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺙ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫‪١٤٤٠x١٤٤٠‬‬ ‫‪٧٢٠x٢٨٨٠‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﻤﻀﺎﺩ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ(‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ 3 MENU 3‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪3 “r REC MENU‬‬ ‫ﻣﻀﺎﺩ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫)ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ( ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫)ﻗﻮﻱ(‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻤﻀﺎﺩ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‪ .
PAGE 53
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﻻﻗﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ(‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ 3 MENU 3‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪3 “r REC MENU‬‬ ‫‪ CS‬ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫‪ 30‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺙ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ‪ ١٥‬ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١٥‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻻﻗﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‪.
PAGE 54
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ(‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ 3 MENU 3‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪3 “r REC MENU‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪ (EV‬ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪ –2.0 EV :‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪+2.0 EV‬‬ ‫– ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪1/3 EV :‬‬ ‫• ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪ EV‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.0.0‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪ .EV‬ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪ EV‬ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‬ ‫ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺩﺍﻛﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻳﻮﻡ‬ ‫ﺻﺎﻑ‪.
PAGE 55
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ )ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ(‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ 3 MENU 3‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪3 “r REC MENU‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻟﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻟﻈﻞ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬ ‫ﻳﻨﺸﺄ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺥ ﻏﺎﺋﻤﺎً ﻭﺍﻟﻈﻞ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻨﺸﺄ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬ ‫ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.
PAGE 56
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪(ISO) ISO‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ 3 MENU 3‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪ISO 3 “r REC MENU‬‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻫﻲ ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﻮء‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻈﺮﻭﻑ‬ ‫‪ISO80‬‬ ‫‪ISO100‬‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻻﻗﻂ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫ﺿﻮﺿﺎء ﺃﻗﻞ‬ ‫‪ISO200‬‬ ‫‪ISO400‬‬ ‫‪ISO800‬‬ ‫‪ISO1600‬‬ ‫‪ISO3200‬‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻻﻗﻂ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ )ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪(.
PAGE 57
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ )ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﺘﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ(‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ 3 MENU 3‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪3 “r REC MENU‬‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﺘﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻛﻨﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﺘﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ً‬ ‫ﺳﻬﻼ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺫﺍﺗﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ )ﻟﻴﺲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﺘﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﺘﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.
PAGE 58
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ(‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ 3 MENU 3‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪3 “r REC MENU‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ )ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﺃﻓﻘﻲ( ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ )ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺭﺃﺳﻲ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.
PAGE 59
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 36‬ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ” “ )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‬ ‫“ )ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﻭﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺭﻣﻮﺯ‪ .
PAGE 60
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‬ ‫“)ﺑﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ( ﻟﺒﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﻭﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻮﺩﺓ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎً‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‬ ‫“‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‬ ‫“‪.
PAGE 61
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‬ ‫“ ﺃﻭ ﺿﻢ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻴﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ” “ ﺃﻭ ” “‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ )ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩﺓ(‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻭﻝ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻻﻗﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ ﻛﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ُﻣﺠﻤﻌﺔ‪ .
PAGE 62
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ )ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ(‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺗﺼﻞ ﻣﺪﺗﻪ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ١٠‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺩﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﻢ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ” “ )ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‬ ‫“ )ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‪.
PAGE 63
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺃﺷﺮﻃﺔ‬ ‫ﺳﻮﺩﺍء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﺃﻭﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻭﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﻣﺪﺓ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١٠‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‪ .‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.
PAGE 64
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‪.“MENU‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‬ ‫“ )ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٤‬‬ ‫‪ .٥‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.
PAGE 65
‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ )ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ(‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ 3 MENU 3‬ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫“‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ ٩٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‬ ‫“‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻻ ﻳﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺒﺴﺎﻃﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ‪.
PAGE 66
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺒﺔ )ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ(‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ 3 MENU 3‬ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺻﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺒﺔ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ 360°‬ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺒﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ 360°‬ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺋﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﺘﺪﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ‪.
PAGE 67
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ )ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻼ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺪﻣﺠﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﻳﻠﺰﻡ‬ ‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ EXILIM Connect‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫‪.Bluetooth® Smart‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 68
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻟﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(76‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻃﺎﺋﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻈﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻃﺮﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪.
PAGE 69
‫‪ .‬ﺣﻮﻝ ‪EXILIM Connect‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ‪ ،EXILIM Connect‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫)ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪EXILIM Connect‬‬ ‫‪http://www.exilim.com/manual/‬‬ ‫• ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻟﺘﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ ،(PDF) EXILIM Connect‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‬ ‫‪ .Reader‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪ CASIO‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪.PDF‬‬ ‫• ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺃﺩﻟﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ EXILIM Connect‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ‪ .
PAGE 70
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ‪ EXILIM Connect‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻭﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬ ‫‪ EXILIM Connect‬ﻋﻠﻰ ™ ‪ Google Play‬ﺃﻭ ‪ App Store‬ﻭﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪.
PAGE 71
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪Bluetooth Smart‬‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪Bluetooth‬‬ ‫ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ )ﺇﻗﺮﺍﻥ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺴﻬﻴﻞ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 72
‫‪.٦‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﻤﺎﻝ ﺇﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻃﺮﻓﻲ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪ ،Android‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ LAN‬ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ١٠‬ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،١٠‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ SSID‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻭﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ LAN‬ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪.
PAGE 73
‫‪ .‬ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻻ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪Bluetooth Smart‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ )ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪ SSID‬ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ“‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”ﺑﺪء“‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ” “ )ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻭﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪ SSID‬ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻭﺳﻴﻮﻣﺾ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 74
‫‪ .‬ﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺠﺐ ﻓﻌﻠﻪ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ LAN‬ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻫﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺫﻛﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﺙ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﺑﺈﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ SSID‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.
PAGE 75
‫‪.٤‬‬ ‫ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ SSID‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪LAN‬‬ ‫ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٥‬‬ ‫‪ .٦‬ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺒﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ”‪.“EXILIM Connect‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ”ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ“‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪) EXILIM Connect‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 76
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬ ‫)ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ(‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻭﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [p‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‪.
PAGE 77
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻭﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ” “ )ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ“‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫‪ .٤‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻨﻪ‪.
PAGE 78
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ‪ .Bluetooth Smart‬ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ً‬ ‫ﻛﻼ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪ Bluetooth‬ﻭﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ LAN‬ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ”ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ“‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(79‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 79
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ )ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ(‬ ‫” “ )ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ( ‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ‪ 3‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ”ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ“ ﺃﻭ ”ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ“‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻔﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﺗﻔﻲ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ‪.
PAGE 80
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪ .‬ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(71‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‬ ‫ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ ،Bluetooth Smart‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫– ‪:iPhone‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﻘﻞ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪ SSID‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ .
PAGE 81
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ(‬ ‫ﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺗﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺗﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻔﺴﻚ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﻭﺭﺩ ﻓﻌﻠﻚ ﺗﺠﺎﻫﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻻﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﺓ!‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺗﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ‪.
PAGE 82
‫• ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﺩ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ ‪) EX-FR100CA‬ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻴﺎﺑﺎﻥ ﻓﻘﻂ( ﺃﻭ ‪EX-FR200CA‬‬ ‫– ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ *‪ EX-FR100‬ﺃﻭ ‪EX-FR200‬‬ ‫* ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 83
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺗﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﺸﻞ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺳﻴﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪ ¥‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ“‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.١‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.
PAGE 84
‫‪ .‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺘﻴﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺗﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ“‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﺘﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺋ ًﻤﺎ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”ﺇﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ“‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ“‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‪ ¥‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ“‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٤‬‬ ‫‪ .٥‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”ﻧﻌﻢ“‪.
PAGE 85
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫”‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ” “ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺘﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻟﻪ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ًّ‬ ‫ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺗﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪١‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪.
PAGE 86
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﻊ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‬ ‫“ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺣﺪﺩﺗﻬﺎ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻔﺼﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ )ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﺩﻫﺎ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ(‪.
PAGE 87
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﻘﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻧﻈﺮﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻭﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺼﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(33‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺠﺎﻫﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪.
PAGE 88
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺑﺄﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ّ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ ١‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺿﻐﻄﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]‪) [0‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ ١‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺒﺪﺃ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺿﻐﻄﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [0‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 89
‫‪ .‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ” “ ﺃﻭ ” “ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .40‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ” “ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ .
PAGE 90
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺑﺄﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ّ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ ١‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪.(91 ،40‬‬ ‫ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺗﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺗﻴﻦ )ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ ١‬ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪(٢‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‬ ‫“ ﺃﻭ ”‬ ‫“‪.
PAGE 91
‫‪ .‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻨﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ ١‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ ٢‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻭﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﺋ ًﻤﺎ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (58‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ”ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ“‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ“ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ CS‬ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (53‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 92
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﻘﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻧﻈﺮﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻭﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺼﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(59‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﺟﻨﺒًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻨﺐ )ﺃﻭ ﺑﺄﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺑﺄﺳﻔﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ( ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪.
PAGE 93
‫‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ ١‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ ،٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ً‬ ‫ﻛﻼ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ ١‬ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ ،٢‬ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ” “ )ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﺃﻭ ” “ )ﺑﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ( ﺑﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‬ ‫“ )ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﺃﻭ ”‬ ‫“ )ﺑﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﻟﻤﻘﻄﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ‪.
PAGE 94
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﻷﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ ١‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ ٢‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ّ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ ١‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺗﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﻭﺿﻊ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(61‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺗﻴﻦ )ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ ١‬ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪(٢‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ”‬ ‫“ ﺃﻭ ”‬ ‫“‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻛﻞ ﻟﻤﺴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ ١‬ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪.٢‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 95
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ‬ ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻭﺛﺎﺋﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﺩ ﻣﻊ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺘﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 96
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪...‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‬ ‫• ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ )ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪(USB‬‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪.(100 ،97‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪(102 ،99‬‬ ‫• ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ‪ ،‬ﺣﺴﺒﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻫﺎ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ Windows‬ﻭ‪.
PAGE 97
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠ ًﻘﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺑﺪﻭﺭﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‪ .
PAGE 98
‫‪.٤‬‬ ‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ”ﻗﺮﺹ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻺﺯﺍﻟﺔ“‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻧﻘﺮًﺍ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ﻛﻘﺮﺹ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻺﺯﺍﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٥‬‬ ‫‪ .٦‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ”ﻧﺴﺦ“ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٧‬ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻮ ‪ :Windows 8.1 ،Windows 10‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ”ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ“‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻧﻘﺮًﺍ ﻳﻤﻴﻨﺎً ﻓﻮﻕ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ”‪.“DCIM‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻮ ‪ :Windows Vista ،Windows 7‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ”ﺑﺪء“ ﺛﻢ ”ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ“‪.
PAGE 99
‫‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫• ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ً‬ ‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺑﺤﻔﻈﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ً‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻢ ﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻢ ﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺖ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﺩﻭﻣﺎً ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.
PAGE 100
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ‪Macintosh‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻰ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‬ ‫‪Macintosh‬‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪/‬ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫‪Macintosh‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‬ ‫‪OS X‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪OS X‬‬ ‫‪ Photos‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،iPhoto‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺮﺩ ً‬ ‫ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺎ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ‪.Macintosh‬‬ ‫‪ OS X 10.5‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪QuickTime Player‬‬ ‫)ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ(‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻀﻤﻦ ﺑﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.
PAGE 101
‫‪ .‬ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫]‪) [p‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‬ ‫‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺮﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ‬ ‫]‪[USB‬‬ ‫‪USB‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻋﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.23‬‬ ‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫)ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [p‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.
PAGE 102
‫‪ .‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺴﻮﺧﺔ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ”‪ “DCIM‬ﻟﻔﺘﺤﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻧﻘﺮًﺍ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻧﻘﺮًﺍ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻧﻘﺮًﺍ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻧﻘﺮًﺍ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺑﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ“ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.104‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Macintosh‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻫﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ )ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 103
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﻠﻒ ﻭﺣﻔﻈﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺄﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻭﻣﺠﻠﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﻢ ﻓﺮﻳﺪ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺑﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(104‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻤﻮﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ٩٩٩٩‬ﻣﻠﻒ ﻛﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺑﺄﺳﻤﺎء ﻣﻦ‬ ‫‪ CIMG0001‬ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ .
PAGE 104
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫‪.(DCF) Design Rule for Camera File System‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ‪DCF‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ .DCF‬ﻻﺣﻆ‪ ،‬ﺃﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻷﺣﻮﺍﻝ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻌﻄﻲ ‪ CASIO‬ﺃﻱ‬ ‫ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺑﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ DCF‬ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺼﻨﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ DCF‬ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺼﻨﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.
PAGE 105
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻣﻤﺘﻌﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ‪ EXILIM 360 Viewer‬ﻟﺘﺘﻤﻜﻦ ً‬ ‫ﻛﻼ ﻣﻦ ‪ EX-FR200‬ﻭ‪ EX-FR200CA‬ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﺮﺽ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺒﺔ ﻭ‪ ٣٦٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‬ ‫• ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺑﺴﻴﻄﺔ ﻭﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫• ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﻭﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ‪ EXILIM 360 Viewer‬ﻣﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺩﻋﻢ ‪ CASIO‬ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪http://world.casio.
PAGE 106
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ )ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.50‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )ﺷﺎﺷﺔ(‬ ‫‪ 3 MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪ ¥‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ“ ‪ 3‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫‪+2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻷﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ ،+1‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻳﺴﺮﺍً‪ .‬ﻳﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‪ .‬ﻳﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‪.
PAGE 107
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ )ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ(‬ ‫‪ 3 MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪ ¥‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ“ ‪ 3‬ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﺑﺎﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻫﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺗﺨﺰﻥ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ‪.
PAGE 108
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ )ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ(‬ ‫‪ 3 MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪ ¥‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ“ ‪ 3‬ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﻭﻗﺘﻤﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻮﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ”ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ “1‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺧﻄﺄ‬ ‫• ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ(‬ ‫‪ 3 MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪ ¥‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ“ ‪ 3‬ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 109
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ )ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ(‬ ‫‪ 3 MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪ ¥‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ“ ‪ 3‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﻴﻦ ﻟﻠﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ ١٠ :‬ﻳﻮﻟﻴﻮ‪٢٠١٧ ،‬‬ ‫ﻳﻮﻡ‪/‬ﺷﻬﺮ‪/‬ﺳﻨﺔ‬ ‫‪17/7/10‬‬ ‫ﺳﻨﺔ‪/‬ﺷﻬﺮ‪/‬ﻳﻮﻡ‬ ‫‪10/7/17‬‬ ‫ﺳﻨﺔ‪/‬ﻳﻮﻡ‪/‬ﺷﻬﺮ‬ ‫‪7/10/17‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )‪(Language‬‬ ‫‪ 3 MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪ ¥‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ“ ‪Language 3‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻌﺜﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺴﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪.
PAGE 110
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ )ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ(‬ ‫‪ 3 MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪ ¥‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ“ ‪ 3‬ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﺘﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺳﺘﺆﺩﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺣﺎﺟﺘﻚ ﻷﻱ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 111
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ(‬ ‫‪ 3 MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪ ¥‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ“ ‪ 3‬ﺇﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 81‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪.
PAGE 112
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬ ‫*ﺧﻄﺮ‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﻫﻠﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻄﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻓﺎﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫*ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻭﻓﺎﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﺠﺎﻫﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫*ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻭﺗﺠﺎﻫﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‪.
PAGE 113
‫*ﺧﻄﺮ‬ ‫• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﺧﻔﺎﻕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺳﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﺯﺍﺋﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎً ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻬﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺸﺤﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎً ﺑﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺷﻴﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺷﺄﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء )ﺳﻼﺳﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻖ‪ ،‬ﻗﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺭﺻﺎﺹ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ(‪.
PAGE 114
‫*ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺪﺧﺎﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺍﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎء ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‬ ‫• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﻨﺒﻌﺚ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﺧﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺍﺋﺤﺔ ﻏﺮﻳﺒﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺨﻄﺮ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﻭﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﻓﻮﺭﺍً ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪+‬‬ ‫* ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺳﺘﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪) [RESET‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(8‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 115
‫*ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻳﺪﻳﻚ ﻣﺒﻠﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ‬ ‫ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺒﺎﺋﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪ CASIO‬ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺮﺽ* ﻻﻧﺴﻜﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺍﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﻓﻮﻗﻪ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺍﺋﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺨﻄﺮ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫"‬ ‫‪+‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﺇﻧﺎء ﺯﻫﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺣﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﺎء ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ .
PAGE 116
‫*ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺴﻘﻮﻁ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻠﻔﻬﺎ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﺘﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺴﻘﻮﻁ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻗﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻄﺮ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﻭﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﻓﻮﺭﺍً ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫* ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺳﺘﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪) [RESET‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(8‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 117
‫*ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪USB‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺳﻮء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺨﻄﺮ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﻭﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫– ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﺘﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﺃﻭ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﺤﺎﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺁﺧﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻓﺄﺓ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺳﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ‪.
PAGE 118
‫*ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺠﻨﺒﻬﺎ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎً ﺑﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻟﻨﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻘﺪﺭ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‬ ‫– ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﻌﺎﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺃﺑﺨﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﻮﺕ‬ ‫– ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺎً ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻓﺂﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺠﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺪﻓﺄﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺳﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻐﻠﻘﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 119
‫ﻣﻀﺎﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻀﺎﺩﺓ ﻟﺘﻨﺎﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﻭﻣﻀﺎﺩﺓ ﻟﻸﺗﺮﺑﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻀﺎﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻀﺎﺩﺓ ﻟﺘﻨﺎﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﻭﻣﻀﺎﺩﺓ ﻟﻸﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 0‬ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺠﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ‪ CASIO‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﻠﺔ*‪ ١‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺻﻴﺎﻏﺘﻬﺎ ً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪٢*.MIL-Standard 810F Method 516.
PAGE 120
‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺳﻄﺢ ﺗﻼﻣﺲ ﺣﺸﻴﺔ ﻏﻄﺎء ]‪ [CARD‬ﻭﻏﻄﺎء ]‪ً [USB‬‬ ‫ﺑﺤﺜﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻣﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﻏﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺃﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻼﻣﺲ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻤﺎﺵ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻈﻴﻔﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺠﺎﻓﺔ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺧﺼﻠﺔ ﺷﻌﺮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺒﺔ ﺭﻣﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺘﺴﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺸﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﺎﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﻓﻲ ﻏﻄﺎء ]‪ [CARD‬ﻭﻏﻄﺎء ]‪ [USB‬ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻠﻮﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻘﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﺪﻭﺵ ﻭﺃﻱ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻏﻼﻕ ﻏﻄﺎء ]‪ [CARD‬ﻭﻏﻄﺎء ]‪ [USB‬ﺑﺄﻣﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺍﺿﻌﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 121
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺗﺴﺎﺧﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻭﺳﺎﺥ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﻞ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻏﻄﺎء ]‪ [CARD‬ﻭﻏﻄﺎء ]‪ [USB‬ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻏﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺎء ﻋﺬﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﻞء ﺩﻟﻮ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻋﺎء ﺁﺧﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺎء ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺒﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺎء ﻋﺬﺏ‬ ‫ﺁﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻐﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ ١٠‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﺑﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻷﻭﺳﺎﺥ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﻝ ﻭﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ‪.
PAGE 122
‫‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﺎﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻋﻨﻴﻔﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﺗﻨﺎﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺠﻤﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻭﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺜﻠﻮﺝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﻌﻄﻞ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺴﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﺑﺄﻱ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺗﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﻌﻄﻞ ً‬ ‫ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD.
PAGE 123
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺧﻄﺄ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻊ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺎ‬ ‫– ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫– ﻓﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫– ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .
PAGE 124
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎً ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﻃﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ‬ ‫ﺧﺪﺵ ﺑﺴﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻋﻄﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺄﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺑﺼﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﻭﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﺎﻓﺨﺎً ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﺤﻔﺎﻅ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻠﻮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺃﻭﺳﺎﺥ ﻭﻏﺒﺎﺭ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺴﺤﻬﻤﺎ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﺑﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ ﻭﺟﺎﻓﺔ‪.
PAGE 125
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪http://world.casio.
PAGE 126
‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ™ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ® ﻓﻲ ﻧﺺ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻌﺪ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪ microSDXC‬ﻫﻮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪.SD-3C, LLC.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ‪ Windows‬ﻭ‪ Windows Vista‬ﻭ‪ Windows 7‬ﻭ‪ Windows 8.1‬ﻭ‪ Windows 10‬ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪ Microsoft Corporation‬ﺑﺎﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﺩﻭﻝ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ‪ Macintosh‬ﻭ‪ Mac OS‬ﻭ‪ QuickTime‬ﻭ‪ iPhoto‬ﻭ‪ iPhone‬ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪.Apple Inc.
PAGE 128
OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. md5 Copyright (C) 1990, RSA Data Security, Inc. All rights reserved. License to copy and use this software is granted provided that it is identified as the "RSA Data Security, Inc. MD5 MessageDigest Algorithm" in all material mentioning or referencing this software or this function. License is also granted to make and use derivative works provided that such works are identified as "derived from the RSA Data Security, Inc.
PAGE 129
‫ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺑﺪﺃ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪...‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺑﺪﺃ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﺬﺍ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻷﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.
PAGE 130
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫• ﻳﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻮﻓﺮﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻮﻓﺮﻩ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺮﺟﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻟﻴﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١٥‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٣٥‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺃﻥ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻭﻗﺘﺎً ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﺎﺩ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻓﺸﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 131
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﻭﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻚ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺒﺎﺋﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺬﺭﺍ ﻛﻲ ﻻ ﺗﺠﺮﺡ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﻮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺣﺎﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻛﻦ ً‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ّ‬ ‫ﺑﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻏﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﻚ ‪ Phillips‬ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪CASIO‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 132
‫‪ .‬ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ّ‬ ‫ﺑﻔﻚ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺑﺮﺍﻏﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺆﻣّﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﻃﺔ ﺑﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﻋﻨﺪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤُﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺘﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٤‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ّ‬ ‫ﺑﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺔ ﺑﺮﺍﻏﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺆﻣّﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 133
‫‪.٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺧﻄﺎﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺮﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻳﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬ ‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺰﻝ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺐ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺧﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﻓﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.
PAGE 134
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 30‬ﻟﻼﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﻭﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺑﺪﺃﺕ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺘﺎﺩﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﺎﺩ ﻟﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(110‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳُﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺻﻄﺤﺎﺑﻚ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎً ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺍً ﻋﻦ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻚ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻜﺘﺒﻚ‪.
PAGE 135
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻌﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(110‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻃﺔ )–( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻻ ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ً ،‬‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 136
‫‪ .‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫–‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪Language‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‬ ‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫–‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬ ‫–‬ ‫ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ‬ ‫–‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ‬ ‫–‬ ‫ﺇﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬ ‫–‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 137
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﺗﺴﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺮﺍﻡ‪...‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﻭﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ (١‬ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ (٢‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﻔﺪ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(19‬ﺇﺫﺍ‬ ‫ﻟﻢ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺒﺎﺋﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫‪ CASIO‬ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﺠﺄﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ (١‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺤﻦ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 138
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﻭﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺿﻮﺿﺎء ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺩﺍﻛﻦ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﺃﺩﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻓﺮﺻﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺿﻮﺿﺎء ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺣﺎً ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ (١‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﻆ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﻇﻬﺮ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 139
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﻭﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻣﺤﻤﻲ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺤﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻨﻲ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ (١‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺎ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﻳﻦ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺃﺣﺪﻫﻤﺎ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ (٢‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 140
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﻭﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﻭﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﺧﻄﺄ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﻭﻗﺖ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﻴﻦ‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(108‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻠﻐﺔ ﺧﻄﺄ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺧﻄﺄ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(109‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﺒﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ‪.USB‬‬ ‫‪ (١‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﺃﻥ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ‪.
PAGE 141
‫ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺖ ﻣﻬﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‪ .‬ﺗﻢ‬ ‫ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻔﺮﻍ ﺷﺤﻨﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺗﻤﺎ ًﻣﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(139‬‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .
PAGE 142
‫ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﻌﺪﻡ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ً‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﻓﺘﺤﻪ ﺗﺎﻟﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.
PAGE 143
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪/‬ﻭﻗﺖ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺧﺎﻃﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻜﺴﻞ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ*‪١‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ‬ ‫ﺳﻌﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ*‪٢‬‬ ‫‪microSD‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺒﺔ‬ ‫‪٣٨٨٨x٣٨٨٨‬‬ ‫‪ ٣٫٦٨‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪١٢‬‬ ‫‪٤١١٧‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ‬ ‫‪١٨٦٤x٧٤٥٦‬‬ ‫‪ ٣٫٤٠‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪١٣‬‬ ‫‪٤٤٥٨‬‬ ‫ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ‬ ‫‪٢٤٢٤x٣٢٣٢‬‬ ‫‪ ١٫٩٣‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪٢٣‬‬ ‫‪٧٨٣٧‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪/‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻼﺕ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(‬ ‫‪1:1‬‬ ‫‪١٤٤٠x١٤٤٠‬‬ ‫)ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ(‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ‬ ‫‪٧٢٠x٢٨٨٠‬‬
PAGE 144
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪/‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻼﺕ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(‬ ‫‪HS120‬‬ ‫‪٧٢٠x١٢٨٠‬‬ ‫)ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺻﻮﺕ(‬ ‫‪HS240‬‬ ‫‪٤٨٠x٦٤٠‬‬ ‫)ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺻﻮﺕ(‬ ‫‪STD‬‬ ‫‪٤٨٠x٦٤٠‬‬ ‫)ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ(‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ‬ ‫)ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ‬ ‫ﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺳﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ*‪٣‬‬ ‫‪٢*microSD‬‬ ‫‪ ٢٤‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺖ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫)‪ ١٢٠‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‬ ‫‪ ٢٤‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺖ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫)‪ ٢٤٠‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ*‪١‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫‪ ٢٩‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪ ٤‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪ ٣‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺖ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫)‪ ٣٠‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﻟﻔ
PAGE 145
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ Exif) JPEG‬ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪٢٫٣‬؛ ‪ DCF‬ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪ ٢٫٠‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ(‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ ،MOV‬ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪) IMA-ADPCM ،H.
PAGE 146
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫)ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪،ISO 800 ،ISO 400 ،ISO 200 ،ISO 100 ،ISO 80 ،‬‬ ‫‪ISO 3200 ،ISO 1600‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ :‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ )ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‬ ‫‪:Bluetooth‬‬ ‫• ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪:‬‬ ‫‪Bluetooth ver2.1+EDR‬‬ ‫ﻓﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪٢‬‬ ‫‪Bluetooth Smart‬‬ ‫‪:Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭ‪IEEE 802.11b/g/n :‬‬ ‫• ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ١ :‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١١‬ﻗﻨﺎﺓ‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻔﻴﺮ‪WPA2 :‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ )ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ(‬ ‫‪:Bluetooth‬‬ ‫• ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪:‬‬ ‫‪Bluetooth ver2.
PAGE 147
‫ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺜﻞ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ ﻟﻠﻮﻗﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ )‪ ٢٣‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ( ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻀﻤﻮﻧﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻘﻠﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.
PAGE 148
‫‪ .
PAGE 149
ً ‫ﺇﻋﻼﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻻﺗﺤﺎﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﺑﻲ‬ Manufacturer: CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD. 6-2, Hon-machi 1-chome, Shibuya-ku, Tokyo 151-8543, Japan Responsible within the European Union: Casio Europe GmbH Casio-Platz 1, 22848 Norderstedt, Germany www.casio-europe.com To comply with the relevant European RF exposure compliance requirements, this EX-FR200CA, EX-FR200CT must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with other transmitter.
PAGE 150
.‫ ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ‬FCC ‫ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬ GUIDELINES LAID DOWN BY FCC RULES FOR USE OF THIS UNIT IN THE U.S.A. (not applicable to other areas). NOTICE This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation.
PAGE 151
CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD.